Digital Workstation اﻟﻌرﺑﯾﺔ اﻟﻔﺎرﺳﻲ ﺟﮭﺎز رﻗﻣﻲ اﯾﺳﺗﮕﺎه ﮐﺎر دﯾﺟﯾﺗﺎل ﻛﺗﯾّب اﻟﻣﺎﻟك دﻓﺗرﭼﮫ راھﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﺎﻟﮏ Lorem ipsum Yamaha Global Site https://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads https://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Group © 2020 Yamaha Corporation Published 12/2020 LBMA*.
ﯾﻣﻛن اﻟﻌﺛور ﻋﻠﻰ رﻗم اﻟطراز ،واﻟرﻗم اﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ ،وﻣﺗطﻠﺑﺎت اﻟطﺎﻗﺔ ،وﻣﺎ إﻟﻰ ذﻟك ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟوﺣﺔ اﻻﺳم اﻟﻣوﺟودة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺟزء اﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣن اﻟوﺣدة أو ﺑﺎﻟﻘرب ﻣﻧﮭﺎ .ﯾﺟب ﻋﻠﯾك ﺗدوﯾن ھذا اﻟرﻗم اﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻣﺗوﻓرة أدﻧﺎه واﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎظ ﺑﮭذا اﻟدﻟﯾل ﻛﺳﺟل داﺋم ﻟﻌﻣﻠﯾﺔ اﻟﺷراء ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋدة ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣدﯾد اﻟﮭوﯾﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺳرﻗﺔ. رﻗم اﻟطراز اﻟرﻗم اﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ )(bottom_ar_01 ﺷﻣﺎره ﻣدل ،ﺷﻣﺎره ﺳ﷼ ،ﺿرورﯾﺎت ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺗﻐذﯾﮫ و ﻣوارد دﯾﮕر را ﻣﯽﺗوان روی ﺑرﭼﺳب ﻧﺎم دﺳﺗﮕﺎه ﯾﺎ ﻧزدﯾﮏ آن ﮐﮫ در زﯾر دﺳﺗﮕﺎه ﻗرار دارد ﻣﺷﺎھده ﮐرد .
ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ. ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ٍ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ • ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ACﻟﻼﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺁﻻﺕ Yamahaﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ .ﻭﻻ ﻳُﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻷﻱ ﻏﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ. • ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ .ﻭﻻ ﻳُﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺭﻁﺑﺔ. • ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ACﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﻪ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ .
ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺗﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﺑﺟﺭﻭﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﻠﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ .ﻭﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ/ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩ AC ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ .ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ.
ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺻﻣﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ PSR-A5000ﻟﺗﻠﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻧﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻗﻳﺔ ،ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺔ ﻣﻠﻬﻣﺔ -ﻳﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﺑﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﻛﻡ ُ ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﻱ ﺭﺍﺋﻊ. ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺑّﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﺍﻗﻌﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺫﻫﻝ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ PSR-A5000ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻗﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻳﻠﺔ ،ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻥ .ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻭﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭ -ﺑﻔﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻲ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ.
ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺗُﻌﺩ (General MIDI) GMﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻎ ﺍﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﺷﻳﻭﻋﺎ ً ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ .ﻭﺻﻳﻐﺔ GM System Level 2ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﺯﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻳﻐﺔ GMﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺳّﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ .ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ،ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ،ﻭﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ، ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺣﺩ.
ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻛﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ. ﺍﻟﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻛﺗﻳّﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻟﻙ )ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺏ( ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺭﺍﺯ .PSR-A5000 ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻛﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ( ) Reference Manualﻛﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻌﻲ( )ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﻧﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻣﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺳﻳﺔ( ﻭﺃﻏﺎﻥ ﻭﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ.
ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ —PSR-A5000ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ،ﻣﻊ ﺫﻛﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﻁﻼﻉ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﺎﺕ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻬﻡ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻹﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻔﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ،ﻓﺎﻁﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ. كم * :ﻛﺗﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻁﺭﺍﺯ ) PSR-A5000ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺏ( .ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻭﻝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ .
ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ PSR-A5000ﻣﻊ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ كم ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ،ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ،ﺇﻟﺦ( ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ —PSR-A5000ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )*( ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺯﻡ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ Yamaha )ﻳﻁﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﺍﺳﻡ "ﺍﻟﺣﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻣﻳﺯﺓ"( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ Yamaha MusicSoft https://www.yamahamusicsoft.
ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ٣ ............................................................................................................................................................. ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ٥ ............................................................................................................................................................. ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺿﻣﻧﺔ ٦ ...............................................................................................................
ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ٤ ﺍﻟﻐﻧﺎء ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ—ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ٦٨... ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ٦٨ .................................................................................................................................................. ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ )ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ MIDIﻓﻘﻁ( ٧١ .................................................................................................................. ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ٧٣ .................
ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻳﻭﺿّﺢ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺗﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻬﻡ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻓﻬﻣﺎ ً ﺃﻓﺿﻝ. ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ—ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ PSR-A5000ﺑﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺣﺑﺔ )ﺗُﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ") "Stylesﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ(( ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ،ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺎﺯ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ .
ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ—ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ) Scale Tuneﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ( ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺇﻧﺷﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ .ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ) Scale Tune Memoryﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ( ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻙ .ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ) Scale Tune Memoryﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ ﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ.
ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ۳۲ ۳۱ ﻋﺻﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ،ﺯﺭ ] ............... [JOYSTICK HOLDﺻﻔﺣﺔ ٦٠ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ. ﺯﺭ ] ....................................... [MENUﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺗﺎﻥ ٢٧ ،٢٢ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ. ﺯﺭ ][STYLE TEMPO LOCK/ASSIGNABLE .......................................................
ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ] [ )ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ..............................ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ١٨ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ. ﺯﺭﺍ .................................................. TEMPOﺻﻔﺣﺔ ٤٠ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻭﻧﻭﻡ. ﻗﺭﺹ ] .........................
ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ .............. REGISTRATION MEMORYﺻﻔﺣﺔ ٨٧ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ. ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ........... ONE TOUCH SETTINGﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺗﺎﻥ ٥٢ ،٤١ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ. ٣١ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ........... MULTI PAD CONTROLﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺗﺎﻥ ٦٢ ،٥١ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻁﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﺣﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ﻭﻋﺯﻓﻬﺎ. ٣٢ﺯﺭﺍ ....................................UPPER OCTAVEﺻﻔﺣﺔ ٥٣ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻛﺗﺎﻑ.
ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ) DC INﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ( .......................ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ١٨ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ. ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ]........................................... [AUX INﺻﻔﺣﺔ ١٠٤ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ،ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺷﻐّﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ. ﻣﻘﺑﺳﺎ ])،SUB (AUX) OUTPUT [1 (L/L+R ] ...................................................... [(R) 2ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ١٠٣ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ .
ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺻّﻝ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ACﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ. ۳ ۲ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ AC ﻣﻘﺑﺱ DC IN )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ (١٧ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ AC ۱ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻭﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺗﻙ. ﺗﺣذﯾر ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ACﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ (١١٧ﻓﻘﻁ .ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ACﺍﻟﺧﺎﻁﺊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ.
ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﻗﺔ ،ﺗﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ) Auto Power Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ً ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ .ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ٣٠ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .(١٩ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ( ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ .
ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺿﻭﺍء ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺿﻭﺍء ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ. ١ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )) (Utilityﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ١ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .(١٩ ٢ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ") "Touch Screen/Displayﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ/ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ(. ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]) [Touch Screen/Displayﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ/ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. ٣ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. ) Screenﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ( ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ .
ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ LCDﻭﺃﺿﻭﺍء ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺗﻙ ﺑﺻﺭﻳﺎ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻬﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ. ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺿﻭﺍء ﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ .ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﻭﺩﻻﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ. ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻳﺎً .ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ "ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ .
ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ. ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ،ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ. )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ (٢٧ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺗﺎﺭ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .(١٠٢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ) .
ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺗﺎﻥ .(٦٨ ،٦٤ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻙ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .(٨٥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ (٢٦ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ. ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺳﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻛﻝ ﻗﺳﻡ ،ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .(٨١ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ،ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﻏﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .
ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﺎً :ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ .ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ .ﻭﺗﺷﻳﺭ "ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ .ﻭﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺩﺧﻠﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ .
ﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ،ﻣﺛﻝ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ .ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ،ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ. ﺟﺯء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ .ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺩﻋﻲ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻛﻳﻔﻣﺎ ﺗﺷﺎء ﻫﻧﺎ ،ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ Assignable )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ( )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻫﻲ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺭﻯ .ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ VOICEﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ STYLEﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ .ﻭﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ،ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ،Voiceﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺗﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ.
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺩﺧﻠﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺣﺗﻳﻥ ،ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ] [Menu 1ﺃﻭ ] ،[Menu 2ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ. ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺟﺯﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .(١٠٩ ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻬﺎ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺎً.
ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻛﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ .ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﺧﻔﺽ/ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ].[INC]/[DEC ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ( ﺗﻧﺑﯾﮫ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ،ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ ﺗﺫ ّﻛﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ.
ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ENTERﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ][DEC]/[INC ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺗﻳﻥ. ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﻟﻣﺳﻪ ،ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [INC]/[DECﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ .ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﺩ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺍ ً ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺩﺕ ﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ.
ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ ً—ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ ً ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ—ﺑﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ .ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ١١١ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ. ١ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ].[DIRECT ACCESS ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻁﺎﻟﺑﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ.
ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺃﻧﺷﺄﺗﻬﺎ ،ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟّﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ،ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ )ﻳﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ "ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ"( ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ .USBﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ، ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺎً .ﻭﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻙ ﺑﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ،ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﻭﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺇﻟﺦ .ﻭﺗﺗﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ.
٦ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [OKﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ. ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺃﺑﺟﺩﻱ. ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ،ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ. ١ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ) Userﺻﻔﺣﺔ ،(٢٦ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ. ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ )) (UPﺃﻋﻠﻰ(.
٤ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ/ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﻛﻝ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ. ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ/ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻠﻬﺎ( .ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ. ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [Select Allﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ،ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ. ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ].[All Off ٦ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺭ( ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻟﺻﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ/ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ. ٧ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [Copy hereﺃﻭ ] [Move hereﻟﻠﺻﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ/ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ .
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ/ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ،ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻻﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻟﺦ .ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ۳ ،۲ ۱ ١ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ. ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]) [Symbolﺃﻭ ] ([abcﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ )ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ( ﺍﻟﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻳﺔ. )) (Shiftﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ(. ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ٢ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] ،[]/[ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [INC]/[DECﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ.
ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ )ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ،ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﺄﺛﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ،ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺄﺧﺫ ﻭﻗﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻭﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ،ﺗﺣﻣﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺑﺙ ﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ. ١ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ].[Panel Lock] [MENU ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ .PIN ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ٢ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [OKﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ.
ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ—ﻟﻠﻌﺯﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ PSR-A5000 ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺎ ً ﻭﻋﺯﻑ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ )ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ... ﺹ٤١ . ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ )ﺃﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺂﻟﻔﻲ/ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ( ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ. ﺃﻭ ...ﺹ٣٨ . ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ...ﺹ٤٢ .
...ﺹ٧٦ . ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ—ﻟﻠﻌﺯﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ PSR-A5000 ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ...ﺹ٥٤ . ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﺩﺍء :ﺹ٥٦ . ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ... ﺹ٥١ . ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ...ﺹ٥٤ . ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ ...ﺹ٧٦ . ﺍﻟﻐﻧﺎء ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﺩﺍء :ﺹ٦٨ . ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ...ﺹ٩١ .
١ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ—ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻳﻭﺿّﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﻋﺯﻓﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( .ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ،ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ )ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ( ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ. ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻣﻌﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .
٤ ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ. ّ ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ [ ) ،(SYNC STARTﺛﻡ ﺍﻋﺯﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺂﻟﻔﺔ ﺑﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] STYLE CONTROL ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ. ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] STYLE CONTROL ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺯﻑ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .٥٦ [ ).(START/STOP ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻳﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ .ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﺻﻑ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ.
ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﺍﻥ [-] TEMPOﻭ [+] TEMPOﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺭﻭﻧﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ .MIDI ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ MIDIﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ].[RESET/TAP TEMPO ﺍﻟﺯﺭﺍﻥ [+]/[-] TEMPO ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .٧٠ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ [-] TEMPOﺃﻭ [+] TEMPOﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺑﺛﻘﺔ .
ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ )ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﺳﺗﺩﻋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ً ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ )ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ،ﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ، ﺇﻟﺦ( ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻳﺎ ً ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺭﺭﺕ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻟﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ً ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ. ١ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﺎﻥ ٢ – ١ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .(٣٨ ٢ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ [1] ONE TOUCH SETTINGﺇﻟﻰ ].
ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ LEFT :ﻭ RIGHT 1ﻭ RIGHT 2ﻭ RIGHT 3ﻭﻟﻛﻝ ﻗﺳﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ. ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ PART ON/OFFﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺯﻳﺞ ﺳﻠﺱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ. ﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻗﺳﻡ.
ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ) LEFTﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ( ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ [LEFT HOLD] PART ON/OFFﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ LEFTﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،ONﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ،LEFTﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ. ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻼﺷﻰ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳﺎ ً ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ،ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺗﺭﻳﺔ ،ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻼﺷﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻼﺷﻰ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳﺎً ،ﻣﺛﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻭ ،ﺑﺑﻁء ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻪ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺯﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻣﻳﺔ( .ﻭﻳﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻧﻅﺭﺍ ً ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺂﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ.
ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ )(Style + Left ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ )،Left ،Style (Right 3 ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ) (Styleﻭﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ) (Leftﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺗﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻳُﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺂﻟﻔﺔ ﻭﻗﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء LEFTﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ. ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ً ﻣﻥ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ][Style + Left ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ.
ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺂﻟﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺂﻟﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺯﻑ ﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ. ١ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻉ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ/ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ. ][Split & Fingering] [MENU ٢ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. ١ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ—ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ Chord Detection Area ﺍﺧﺗﺭ " .
ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻗﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ١ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ PART SELECTﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ. ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )ﻟﻠﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ(. ٢ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ (٢٤ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )Reference Manualﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ(. ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ. ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ .
ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺭﻱ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻼﺳﻳﻛﻳﺔ .ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻥ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻱ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺕ ﻭﺧﻔﺿﻬﺎ .ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻩ ﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺋﻪ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻼً. ١ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ،ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ. ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ ﻣﺻﻁﻠﺢ "ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻣﻳﺔ" ﻫﻭ ﻣﺭﺟﻊ ﻟﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺃﻧﺎﺑﻳﺏ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ )ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻡ(.
ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺂﻟﻔﻲ/ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺂﻟﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ) ١ RIGHTﺇﻟﻰ .(٣ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺂﻟﻔﻲ ﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ،ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺂﻟﻔﻲ ) ،duetﻭ ،trioﻭﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ( ،ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺩﻯ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻌﺎﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺯﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ. ﺗﻣ ّﻛﻧﻙ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺯﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺂﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ( ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻭﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺂﻟﻔﺔ .
• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ACMPﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ :LEFT ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ )(Left ﺃﻗﺳﺎﻡ ١ RIGHTﺇﻟﻰ ٣ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ LEFTﻭﻗﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺂﻟﻔﺔ ﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺂﻟﻔﻲ • ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ACMPﻭﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ :LEFT ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ):(Style ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ )(Left ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ—ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻗﺳﺎﻡ ١ RIGHTﺇﻟﻰ ٣ ١ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ LEFT ﻗﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺂﻟﻔﺔ ﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺅﺛﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺂﻟﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ً ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻭﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺂﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺯﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻳﻣ
٥ ﺍﻋﺯﻑ ﻧﻭﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻭﺗﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ. ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺯﻓﻬﺎ. ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭ ،ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ].[HARMONY/ARPEGGIO ٥٠ PSR-A5000ﻛﺗﻳّﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻟﻙ ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ • ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ، ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ/ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ،ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻳﻭﺏ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ. ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ [MENU] : ].
ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ١ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ [SELECT] MULTI PAD CONTROLﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ. ٢ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ. ٣ ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ. ّ ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .(٢٤ ١ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ—ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ [٤] – [١] MULTI PAD CONTROLﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﺯﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻖ .
ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ )ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ Userﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ) .(OTSﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ّ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ USBﻛﺈﻳﻘﺎﻉ ،ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻛﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ. ١ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ. ٢ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ،ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ.
ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺻﻑ ﻧﻐﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ](TRANSPOSE [-]/[+ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﺍﻥ ] TRANSPOSE [-]/[+ﺑﺈﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻬﺎ )ﺻﻭﺕ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ ،MIDIﻭﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ( ﻓﻲ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺻﻑ ﻧﻐﻣﺔ )ﻣﻥ ١٢-ﺇﻟﻰ .(١٢ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ،٠ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [+ﻭ] [-ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ.
ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﻘﺭﺻﻲ ،LIVE CONTROLﺃﻭ ﻋﺻﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ LIVE CONTROLﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]/STYLE TEMPO LOCK ،[ASSIGNABLEﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ .ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ/ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﺎ ً ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ. ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻘﺭﺻﻲ LIVE CONTROL ﻳﻁﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺭﺻﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ "ﻧﻭﻉ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ" .
ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] ASSIGNABLE [A]–[Fﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ ].[STYLE TEMPO LOCK/ASSIGNABLE ١ ﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ].[Assignable] [MENU ١ ۲ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ—ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ٢ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ )ﺍﻟﻣﺱ( ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺯء ""Assignable Buttons )ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ(. ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺑﺛﻘﺔ. ٣ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ.
٢ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ—ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ( ،ﻓﺄﻧﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺩ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﺯﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ .ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ :ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺑّﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ.
ﺍﻟﺑﺩء/ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ Fade In/Outﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳﺔ ﺳﻠﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ .ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ. ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ (٥٤ﻭ"ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ "ASSIGNABLE )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .(٩٥ • ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻲ: ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ/ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ .
ﺯﺭ ][BREAK ﻳﻣ ّﻛﻧﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻗﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺯﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺣﺏ .ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [BREAKﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺯﻑ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ .ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﻋﺯﻑ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻭﻗﻔﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ،ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺯﻑ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ. ﺣﻭﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻗﺳﺎﻡ )(ENDING، BREAK، MAIN VARIATION ،INTRO • ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ :ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻳﺎً. • ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ )ﻭﺍﻣﺽ( :ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺯﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻳﺎ ً ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ.
٣ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ [ON/OFF] CHORD LOOPERﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺂﻟﻔﺔ. ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺂﻟﻔﺔ ،ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] ،[ACMPﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺂﻟﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺗُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻓﻘﻁ. ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ،ﻭﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ON/OFFﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ.
ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻙ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺻﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﺻﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ) (Xﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ) ،(Yﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﺷﻛ ٍﻝ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ. ﺣﺭﻙ ﻋﺻﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ. ّ +Y -X +X -Y ﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺔ :X ﻁ ّ ﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻋﺻﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ( ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ )ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻋﺻﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻁ ّ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ .
ﻋﺯﻑ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺳﻭﺑﺭ ﺁﺭﺗﻛﻳﻭﻟﻳﺷﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ً ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭ " - Articulationﺁﺭﺗﻛﻳﻭﻟﻳﺷﻥ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺗﺎﺕ .ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺟﻠﻳﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﻋﺯﻑ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ،ﻣﺛﻝ ،staccatoﻭ ،legatoﻭ.slur ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺳﻭﺑﺭ ﺁﺭﺗﻛﻳﻭﻟﻳﺷﻥ )ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ (S.Artﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻓﻭﺍﺭﻕ ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻌﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺯﻓﻙ .ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ) (S.Artﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺳﻭﺑﺭ ﺁﺭﺗﻛﻳﻭﻟﻳﺷﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ .
ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ١ ﻱ ٍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ [1] MULTI PAD CONTROLﺇﻟﻰ ] [4ﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻲ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ ّ ﺑﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ. ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳﺎً .ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺯﻑ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ. ٢ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [STOPﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ.
ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﻟﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺑﺩء ﻋﺯﻑ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ. ١ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ،[SELECT] MULTI PAD CONTROLﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ] [1ﺇﻟﻰ ].[4 ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ. ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ، ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [STOPﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ.
٣ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻧﺎء ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ—ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ. ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ،١ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻣﻌﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .(٨٧ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ— MIDIﻭﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ. ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ،ﺗﺷﻳﺭ "ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ MIDIﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎً ،ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺎً ،ﻭﺇﻟﺦ .
ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ. • ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ ً )ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ (MIDI • ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ )ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ (٨٥ • ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺎً :ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MIDIﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ،(Standard MIDI File) SMFﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ WAVﺃﻭ .MP3 .........WAVﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ٤٤٫١ﻛﻳﻠﻭﻫﺭﺗﺯ ،ﺩﻗﺔ ١٦ﺑﺕ ،ﺇﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ .........
ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ )ﻭﺿﻊ (Song Player ١ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [PLAYERﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ .ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ .Song Player ۲ ٢ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺯء MIDIﺃﻭ .Audio ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻖ ) MIDIﺃﻭ .(Audio ٣ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ. ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ،ﻳﺳﺗﺩﻋﻲ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺛﻡ ] [Audio Informationﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ. ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .
ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ )ﻭﺿﻊ (Song List ١ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [SONGﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ .ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ .Song List ۲ ٢ ﺃﻏﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ٍ ﺃﻏﺎﻥ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ٍ ٣ ﺍﻟﻐﻧﺎء ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ—ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻏﺎﻥ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ. )) (Newﺟﺩﻳﺩ( ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻟﻣﺱ ٍ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ Reference Manualﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ.
٤ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻧﺎء ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ—ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﺃﻏﺎﻥ :ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ ،ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ٍ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ. ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ SONG ] .
ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ )ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺑﺛﻘﺔ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ) (PREVﺃﻭ ] [ ) ،(NEXTﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻸﻏﻧﻳﺔ .ﻭﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ/ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ. ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ MIDIﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) Phrase Markﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻲ( .
ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻸﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻧﺎء ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ ﺗﺯﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗُﺿﻌﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻱ ﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ. ﻭﻳﻣ ّﻛﻧﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻏﻧﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ "ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﻳﻭﻛﻲ" ﺃﻭ ﻋﺯﻑ ﻗﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ،ﻧﻅﺭﺍ ً ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻼﺕ. ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻧﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )) (Vocal Cancelﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻧﺎء(.
ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ )ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ MIDIﻓﻘﻁ( ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ) SP1ﺇﻟﻰ (SP4ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ .MIDIﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ MIDIﻓﻘﻁ ،ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺯﻑ ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻣ ّﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻏﺎﻧﻲ "ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ" ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ. ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ١ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ MIDIﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ،(٦٦ﻭﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .(٦٨ ٢ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺳﻧﺷﺭﺡ ﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭﻳﻥ ] [١ﻭ].[٢ ١ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ٢ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺟﺗﻳﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ] ،[١ﺍﻟﻣﺱ )) (Play/Pauseﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ( ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ. )) (Loopﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ( ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ. ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺯﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ] ،[٢ﺛﻡ ﻳﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ] [١ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ.
ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ )) (scoreﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ( ﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ MIDI ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ )ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ( ﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ MIDIﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ .ﻧﻘﺗﺭﺡ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﺃ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺏ. ١ ٢ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ ) MIDIﺻﻔﺣﺔ .(٦٦ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ. )) (scoreﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [ﺃﻭ ] [ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ.
ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ. ١ ٢ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .(٦٦ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ. )) (Lyricsﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ،ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ .ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [ﺃﻭ ] [ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ .ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ، ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﻳﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ.
ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ) Talkﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﺙ( ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ ً ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻬﻭﺭﻙ .ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺍ ً ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺯﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﺩﻯ ﺗﺷﺗﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﺑﺎﻫﻬﻡ ﻭﻫﻛﺫﺍ. ١ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ Mic Settingﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ].[Mic Setting] [MENU ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺍﺳﺔ ﻗﺩﻡ ﻷﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ASSIGNABLEﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﺩﺍء .ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ .
٥ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﻁﻰ )(Scale Tune ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ .ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ] [MENU ].[Scale Tune ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ؛ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ Mainﻭﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ .Sub ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ :Main ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ .ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺳﻠﻡ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻪ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ .ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺅﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ.
ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻣﺳﺑﻘًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ (Main ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﻼﻟﻡ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺯﻑ ﺑﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻔﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ. ۱ ۲ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ Mainﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ١ ﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ(. Type • • • • • ٢ ٥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﻁﻰ )(Scale Tune • :Equalﻣﺩﻯ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺛُﻣﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺳﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺛﻧﻲ ﻋﺷﺭ ﻗﺳﻡ ،ﻣﻊ ﻛﻝ ﻧﺻﻑ ﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﻣﺗﺑﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ .
ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﻁﻰ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ (Sub ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺳﻼﻟﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ .Sub Scaleﻳﺄﺧﺫ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ،ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺭﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ ،ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ .Main Scaleﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻻً ﻓﻘﻁ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ) Sub Scaleﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ،ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ " "Subﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ (Scale Tune ١ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،Scale Tuneﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [Subﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ .Sub Scale ۱ ۲ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ Sub Scaleﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ Sub Scaleﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ .
ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ Sub Scale ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ Sub Scaleﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ SCALE TUNE SETTINGﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ (Scale Tuneﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ SCALE MEMORYﻟﻼﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭﻱ. ١ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ Sub Scaleﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ SCALE TUNE SETTINGﻭﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ .Scale Tune ٢ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ،[MEMORY] SCALE TUNE MEMORY ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ) [٥]–[١] SCALE TUNE MEMORYﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ .
ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ Scale Tuneﺣﻔﻅ Scale Tune Memoryﻛﻣﻠﻑ Bank ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ Sub Scaleﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ [٥]–[١] SCALE TUNE MEMORYﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ Scale Tune Memory Bank ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ٠٤ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ٠٣ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ٠٢ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ٠١ ١ ٢ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ Sub Scaleﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ SCALE TUNE .[٥] - [١] MEMORY ﺍﻟﻣﺱ )) (Saveﺣﻔﻅ( ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻠﻑ .Bank ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .
٦ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻛﻝ ﻗﺳﻡ - ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺳﺭ ﻳﻣﻧﺣﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺳﺭ ﺗﺣﻛﻣﺎ ً ﺣﺩﺳﻳﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻧﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ/ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ،ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ .ﻭﻳﻣ ّﻛﻧﻙ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ )ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﻟﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﻭﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺑﺄﻓﺿﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ، ﻭﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ. ﻳﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﻛﺳﺭ .ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ Reference Manualﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ.
٣ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ. Filter ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻧﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ )ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ(. EQ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻭﺍء ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. Effect ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭ ﻭﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻘﻪ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻗﺳﻡ. Chorus/Reverb ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﻭﺭﺱ/ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻯ ﻭﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻘﻪ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻗﺳﻡ. Pan/Volume ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻗﺳﻡ. ٤ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ. ٥ ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ.
ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻛﻝ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ MIDI ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﺣﺳﺎﺱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ MIDIﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ/ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﺋﻲ. ﻗﻧﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. • :Rhythm 1/2ﻫﺫﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ،ﻭﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﻶﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﻭﺁﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ. • :Bassﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺱ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺁﻻﺕ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ. • :Chord 1/2ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻟﻠﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺂﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ً ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺗﺎﺭ.
ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻧﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ MIDI ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .Mixer ١ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،Mixerﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [Styleﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ].[Song ٢ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ. ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ٣ ٨٤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ،ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ٥ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .
٧ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻙ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ :ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ MIDIﻭﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻲ .ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ،ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ MIDIﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺗﻳﻥ) Quick Recording :ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ( ،ﻭﻫﻭ ﺃﺳﻬﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭﻫﻣﺎ ﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ،ﻭ) Multi Recordingﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ(، ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ .ﺳﻧﻠﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Quick Recordingﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻳﻥ MIDI ﻭ.
٢ ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ. ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ، ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ].[Play/Pause ٣ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [Stopﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ. ٤ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [Saveﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟّﻝ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .(٣١ ﺗﻧﺑﯾﮫ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻏﻠﻘﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺻﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ.
٨ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻁﻠﺑﻙ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ—ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ،ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻁﻠﺑﻙ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ—ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ،ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻣ ّﻛﻧﻙ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ) Registration Memoryﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ( ﻣﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ )ﺃﻭ "ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ"( ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎً ،ﺛﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻁﻠﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺋﻙ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ ً ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ .
ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻁﻠﺑﻙ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ١ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ،ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ. ٢ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [MEMORYﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ REGISTRATION MEMORYﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ .Registration Memory ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ Registration Memoryﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ .
ﺣﻔﻅ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﻣﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ. ١ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ [+] REGIST BANKﻭ] [-ﻣﻌﺎ ً ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ. ۲ ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .(٣١ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻁﻠﺑﻙ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ—ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ،ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ٢ )) (File Editﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ( ﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺑﺛﻘﺔ ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ][Save ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ.
ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻥ ] [١ﺇﻟﻰ ] [٨ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ. ١ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ. ٢ )) (Menuﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ( ﺛﻡ ] [Regist Bank Infoﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ) Regist Bank Informationﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(. ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺣﺗﻳﻥ :ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺕ Voiceﻭﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ .
ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻌﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺯﻓﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ .ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺧﻡ ﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ( ﻭﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻋﺯﻑ. ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ١ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [PLAYLISTﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ .
ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺟﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ: ﻳﺳﺗﺩﻋﻲ ﻟﻣﺱ [Search] Add Recordﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ .ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ Reference Manualﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ. ﻣﻥ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ،ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [Add to Playlistﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺟﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ. ٣ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺳﺟﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ. ﻳﺳﺗﺩﻋﻲ ﺳﺟﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻑ ﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎ ً ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ .
ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻁﻠﺑﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ١ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [PLAYLISTﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ .Playlist ۲ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻁﻠﺑﻙ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ—ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ،ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ٤ ٢ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. ٣ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ،ﺛﻡ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. ٤ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،Playlistﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ].
ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ١ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [PLAYLISTﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ .Playlist ٢ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻼﺕ. ١-٢ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ. )) (Downﺃﺳﻔﻝ( ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺣﺩﺩﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ .١-٢ )) (Upﺃﻋﻠﻰ(/ ٢-٢ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ٣ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ )) (Saveﺣﻔﻅ( ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ. ﺣﺫﻑ ﺳﺟﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ١ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،Playlistﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ. ٢ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [Deleteﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ.
٩ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺃﺩﺍء .ﻳﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ،ASSIGNABLEﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ،ﻭﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ ،ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ،ﻛﺎﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ. ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻛﺛﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ .
ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ( ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ Utilityﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ .ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ، ﻭﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ .ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ،ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ. ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ١ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. ][Utility] [MENU ٢ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ،ﻭﻏﻳّﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻔّﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ.
ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ )ﺍﻟﺿﺎﻏﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ،ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ( ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﻏﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ. ١ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [MIXER/EQﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .Mixer ٢ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ "."Master ٣ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ.
ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ-ﺣﺯﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺣﺯﻡ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ " "Expansionﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ .ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ Userﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺗﻲ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ،ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻲ ﻭﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ .
١٠ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ،ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ/ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ. ﻭﻣﻌﺭﻑ IDﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ّ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭ ُﻣﻌﺭﻑ IDﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ. ١ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ].[Utility] [MENU ٢ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ].[System ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ُﻣﻌﺭﻑ IDﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺎ ً ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺎ ً ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ/ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ( ﻭﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ USBﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ .ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻟﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ. ١ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ USBﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻑ ] [USB TO DEVICEﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ. ٢ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ] [Factory Reset/ Backup] [Utility] [MENU ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .
ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ—ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ .ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ .١٦ – ١٤ ﺗﻧﺑﯾﮫ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ،ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ .ﻭﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ،ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ) .(0ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻊ ﻛﻠﻳﺎ ً ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً.
٣ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺗﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺑﺱ ].[MIC/GUITAR INPUT ٤ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ. ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺗﺎﺭ ١ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ. ٢ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ Mic Settingﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ].[Mic Setting] [MENU ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ Mic Setting ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ].[MIC SETTING ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ٣ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [GAINﻣﻥ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﻧﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺗﺎﺭ.
ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺯﻑ )ﻣﻘﺑﺳﺎ ،MAIN OUTPUTﻣﻘﺑﺳﺎ (AUX) SUB (OUTPUT ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻘﺑﺳﺎ MAIN OUTPUTﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻳﻛﺳﺭ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ،ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺱ MAIN .[L/L+R] OUTPUTﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﻓﻘﻁ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ،ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺱ ،ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺯﻳﺟﺎ ً ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺎ ً ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺎ ً ﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ.
ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ .ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ، ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ • ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ. • ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) .
ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺩﻭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ/ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ )ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺱ (FOOT PEDAL ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺩﻭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ FC4Aﺃﻭ FC5ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺳﺔ ) FC7ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺎ ً ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺱ .FOOT PEDALﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﻭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ،ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ،ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺻﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ. ۱ ۲ ﺩﻭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻡ FC7 FC5 FC4A ﻳﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺎ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ .ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺩﻭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ FC4Aﺃﻭ .
ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ) USBﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ]([USB TO DEVICE ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﻓﻼﺵ USBﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ USBﺑﻁﺭﻑ ] .[USB TO DEVICEﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺃﻧﺷﺄﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ ) USBﺻﻔﺣﺔ ،(٣١ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ LAN ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ) USBﺻﻔﺣﺔ .(١٠٧ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻑ ][USB TO DEVICE ﺗﺿﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﻑ ] [USB TO DEVICEﻣﺿﻣﻥ .
ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ USBﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ USBﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ Userﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ،ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ. ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ ،USBﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ USBﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻑ ] [USB TO DEVICEﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎً. ١ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ USBﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻑ ] [USB TO DEVICEﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ. ٢ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ].[Storage] [Utility] [MENU ﺗﻧﺑﯾﮫ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ً .
ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ]([USB TO HOST ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻑ ] ،[USB TO HOSTﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ .MIDIﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺳﻡ " "Computer-related Operationsﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ. ﺗﻧﺑﯾﮫ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ USBﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ABﻁﻭﻟﻪ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ٣ﺃﻣﺗﺎﺭ .ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ .USB 3.0 ﻣﻼﺣظﺔ • ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ USBﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ،ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ً ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺟﻣﻊ .
ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﺟﺎﺯ ﻭﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ،ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﻛﻝ ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .Menu ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ Reference Manualﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ. ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " "ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ .
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ Metronome Live Control Assignable Panel Lock Demo Voice Edit Style Creator Song Recording M.Pad Creator Voice Setting Style Setting Song Setting Chord Tutor Scale Tune Master Tune Transpose Keyboard MIDI Utility Expansion Wireless LAN * Time * ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻭﻧﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ ].[RESET/TAP TEMPO ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻘﺭﺻﻲ LIVE CONTROLﻭﻋﺻﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ.
ﻣﻠﺣﻖ ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺻﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء،[DIRECT ACCESS] ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ .
- ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ Scale Tune - Scale Tune Memory Bank Edit Scale Tune Menu Scale Tune Memory Bank Selection (Scale Tune Memory Bank Selection) Menu - Joystick Live Control Menu - - Assignable Menu - - Split Point & Fingering - Setting Style Setting - - - - - - EQ Multi Pad Chorus/Reverb Mixer Pan/Volume Menu - Compressor EQ Change Behavior Setting Setting Style Setting Style Setting Split Point & Fingering Style Setting - - Regist Bank Edit
ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻱ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ ﺃﻣﻭﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻳُﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻁﻘﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺭﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ. ﻫﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ،ﺇﺫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ. ﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎً. ﻳﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺭﺍ ً ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺎ ً ﻭﻳﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ .Auto Power Offﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .(١٩ ﻳُﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ. ﺗُﺳﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ .
ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻻ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ].[START/STOP ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ACMPﻭﺍﻋﺯﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺣﺏ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ. ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺯﻑ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻘﻁ. ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ].[ACMP ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺂﻟﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺗﺎﻥ .
ﻓﻲ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻲ ،ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ .USB ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ USBﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ. ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ USBﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ .ﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ]) .[Storage] [Utility] [MENUﺻﻔﺣﺔ (١٠٧ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ USBﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ،ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ (١٠٧ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ.
ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ/ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺭﺽ × ﻋﻣﻖ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﺳﻡ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺑﻖ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻋﺻﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﻋﺩﺩ
ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺣﺙ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺂﻟﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻣﻧﺷﺊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ OTS ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﻧﺷﺊ ﻣﻠﺗﻳﺑﺎﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻭﻧﻭﻡ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻟﻳﻑ ﺃﻭﻛﺗﺎﻑ ﻋﻠﻭﻱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻡ
ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ٩٥ ،٥٥ ............................ ASSIGNABLE ١٠٤ ........................................... AUX IN ٤٥ ...................... Chord Detection Area ٦ ..................................................... GM ٦ ...................................................... GS ٦٠ ............................ JOYSTICK HOLD ٤٢ ................................................ LEFT ٤٢ ............................................ LOWER ٤٥ ....................................
ﺽ ﺿﺎﻏﻁ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ٩٧ ........................................ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ )ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ( ٣٦ ،١٦ ....................................... ﻁ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ٤٢ .................................................... ﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺔ ٦٠ ............................................. ﻁ ّ ﻉ ﻋﺯﻑ ﻣﺻﺎﺣﺏ ٣٨ ........................................ ﻋﺻﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ٥٤ ................ LIVE CONTROL ﻋﺻﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ٦٠ .......................................... ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻲ ٦٩ ...................
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble 2. The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data 6. to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License.
libpng This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your convenience. In case of any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in the file png.h that is included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall prevail. COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE: If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence. This code is released under the libpng license. libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000 through 1.6.
FreeType libss2 / libcomerr2 Portions of this software are copyright © 2016 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved. Copyright 1987, 1988 by the Student Information Processing Board of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology ICU COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright © 1991-2016 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
THE C++ WRAPPER FUNCTIONS Contributed by: Google Inc. Copyright (c) 2007-2012, Google Inc. All rights reserved. THE “BSD” LICENCE Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
ﻳﺎ ﻳﮑﯽYamaha ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺑﺎ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻧﺩﮔﯽ ﻣﺟﺎﺯ،ﺟﻬﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ .ﺍﺯ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊﮐﻧﻧﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﺟﺎﺯ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ FRANCE NORTH AMERICA Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: +33-1-6461-4000 CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: +1-416-298-1311 Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620, U.S.A.
ﯾﻣﻛن اﻟﻌﺛور ﻋﻠﻰ رﻗم اﻟطراز ،واﻟرﻗم اﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ ،وﻣﺗطﻠﺑﺎت اﻟطﺎﻗﺔ ،وﻣﺎ إﻟﻰ ذﻟك ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟوﺣﺔ اﻻﺳم اﻟﻣوﺟودة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺟزء اﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣن اﻟوﺣدة أو ﺑﺎﻟﻘرب ﻣﻧﮭﺎ .ﯾﺟب ﻋﻠﯾك ﺗدوﯾن ھذا اﻟرﻗم اﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻣﺗوﻓرة أدﻧﺎه واﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎظ ﺑﮭذا اﻟدﻟﯾل ﻛﺳﺟل داﺋم ﻟﻌﻣﻠﯾﺔ اﻟﺷراء ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋدة ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣدﯾد اﻟﮭوﯾﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺳرﻗﺔ. رﻗم اﻟطراز اﻟرﻗم اﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ )(bottom_ar_01 ﺷﻣﺎره ﻣدل ،ﺷﻣﺎره ﺳ﷼ ،ﺿرورﯾﺎت ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺗﻐذﯾﮫ و ﻣوارد دﯾﮕر را ﻣﯽﺗوان روی ﺑرﭼﺳب ﻧﺎم دﺳﺗﮕﺎه ﯾﺎ ﻧزدﯾﮏ آن ﮐﮫ در زﯾر دﺳﺗﮕﺎه ﻗرار دارد ﻣﺷﺎھده ﮐرد .
Digital Workstation اﻟﻌرﺑﯾﺔ اﻟﻔﺎرﺳﻲ ﺟﮭﺎز رﻗﻣﻲ اﯾﺳﺗﮕﺎه ﮐﺎر دﯾﺟﯾﺗﺎل ﻛﺗﯾّب اﻟﻣﺎﻟك دﻓﺗرﭼﮫ راھﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﺎرﺑری Yamaha Global Site https://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads https://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Group © 2020 Yamaha Corporation Published 12/2020 LBMA*.